Canon | PowerShot S110 | User guide | Canon PowerShot S110 User guide

Canon PowerShot S110 User guide
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-5L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫‪WS-DC11‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LX/CB-2LXE‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫* ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SDHC‬‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﺿﻣﻥ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳُﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺣً ﺎ ﻫﻝ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺗﻧﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )= ‪(۱۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ )= ‪(۸٥‬‬
‫• ﻫﻭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪) i> :‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(< ‪/‬‬
‫>‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) k> :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ(< ‪/‬‬
‫>‪) g‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ‪ ١٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ‪ ١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪ ١٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪ ١٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪ ٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫=‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ(< ‪/‬‬
‫>‬
‫>‪) a‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) 1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) b‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(< ‪/‬‬
‫> )ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(< ‪ /‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) f> / <(Macro) e‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(< ‪ /‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) h‬ﻓﻼﺵ( < ‪ /‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) l‬ﻋﺭﺽ(< ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫* ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻕٍ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۲۷۳‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫• ُﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪۲......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ‪۲............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۳........‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳.........................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪٤........................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ‪٦....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۸.............‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ‪۱۰ .................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۷۸ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۷۸ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪۸٥ ..................................‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪۸٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪۸۷ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۸۸ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۸۸ .........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۸۹ ....................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۹۱ ...................................MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۹۳ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪۹۳ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪۱۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪۲۱ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ‪۲۷ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۳٤ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪۳٥ ..................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪۳٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‪۳۷ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪۳۸ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪٤۱ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۲ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ( ‪٤۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪٤٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٥۰ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪٥٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪٥٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪۷۲ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷٥ .....................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۸٥...........................‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪۹٥.................... Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۹٦ ...................... (Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪۱۱۳ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۱۲۳ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ‪۱۲۹ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۲ .......................‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۳٥...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۱۳٦ .....‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪۱۳۷ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( ‪۱٤۲ .....‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱٥٤ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ‪۱٦۱ ............................‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪۱٦٥................................... P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪۱٦٦ ................................... (<P‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪۱٦٦ ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪۱۷٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۱۸۱ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱۹۳ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۹۸ ............................ RAW‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۹۹ ..................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪۲۰۱.......... C‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ‪۲۰۲ ..............(Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ >‪۲۰۳ ...... (<Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪۲۰٤ .......................... (<M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲۰٦ ..........‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲۱٥..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۱٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪۲۲٤ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۲۳۱ ...................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲۳۳ .........................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲۳٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲٤۰ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲٤۳ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۲٤٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪۲٤۸ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۲٥۰ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۲٥٦ ....................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪۲٦۱..............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۲٦۲ ................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۲۷۷..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪۲۷۸ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۲۷۸ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲۸۱ ....................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲۸٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۳۰۰ ........................ Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۳۰۳....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۳۰٤ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۱۰ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۱٤ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۳۱۸ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‪۳۳۲ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪۳۳۳ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪۳۳۷ ...........................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۹٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫) = ‪(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬
‫) = ‪(۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫)= ‪(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫) = ‪(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫) = ‪(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‬
‫) = ‪(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫) = ‪(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ "ﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ"‬
‫) = ‪(۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫) = ‪(۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‬
‫) = ‪(۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫)= ‪(۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(۱٥۰‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪۱۹۰ ،۱۸٤ ،۱۳۷ ،۹٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪۱۱۱..................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ‪۱٥۷ ،۱۰۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۱۲.....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪۲۲۲ ،۱۱۳ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۱۳٦............................................................‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪۲۱٦...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‪۲۳٤...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۲۸۱.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۲۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۲۲٤...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲٤۰..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱٦۱ ،۹٦.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪۲۱٦...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪۱٦۲.........................................................‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲۸٦............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۲۸ .........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺏ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺳﺎﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠ ﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻟﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻗﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ) ‪ ،( ١‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫˺‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ ▲‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ‪ ( ١‬ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪CB-2LX‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LX z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ) ‪ ( ١‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LXE z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LXE‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ) ‪ ( ١‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۲٦۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )ﻷﺳﻔﻝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺯﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) ‪ ،( ١‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫˺‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) ‪ ،( ١‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫˻‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [o][p‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪.[3‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۸‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ‪ ،(۲۷۸ = ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۸‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <i‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻧﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۲٤۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۲٤۸‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪ ،(۲‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫)ﻳﺳﺗﺛﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ISP‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻔﻬﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista SP2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP SP3‬‬
‫)ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ‪ Windows 7 SP1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.6 – 10.7‬‬
‫)ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ‪ OS X 10.6.8‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ( ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫*‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۱٫٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٫٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :Mac OS X 10.7 :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪Core Duo :Mac OS X 10.6‬‬
‫‪ ۱٫۸۳‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٫٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺕ(‪ ۲ :‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲ :Mac OS X 10.7‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۳۲‬ﺑﺕ(‪ ۱ :Mac OS X 10.6 ،Vista ،‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫‪ ۱ :XP‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‬
‫‪ ٦٤۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ۷٦۸ × ۱۰۲٤‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ۷٥۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫* ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Silverlight 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ(؛ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ )‪ ٥۰۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.6‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪ (۲ =) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) ‪ .( ١‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.6‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۳۰‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ ،[CameraWindow‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ [Canon CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪.[CameraWindow] ◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Dock‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.(RAW‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LX/CB-2LXE‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪NB-5L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪/Windows‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫‪WS-DC11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‬
‫‪WP-DC47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪HF-DC2‬‬
‫* ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ®‪ *Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺻﺩ ًﻗﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪Facebook‬‬
‫‪Twitter‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻣﻥ ﻳﺷﺗﺭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﻌﺿﻭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪(DPS over IP‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺷﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳُﺭَ ﺣﱢ ﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻳﺣﻣﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺭﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻬﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺣﺭﻑ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺿﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪ - DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻫﻭ ‪ PC1819‬ﺃﻭ ‪) PC1882‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻭﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﻭﻫﻭ ‪ .(WM217‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺩﺉ ﺑـ ‪.PC‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪،WLAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫• ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺩ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ -‬ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ )ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺑﺙ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ‪ iPhone‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ‪،iPhone‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗِﺑﻝ ‪.IDA Singapore‬‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳُﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻻً ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺗﺣﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻭﻫﺟﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﻼﻕ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ )ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪(٤٦ =) GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫• ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫)=‪(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫)= ‪(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫)= ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫)= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫)= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۲۸٦‬‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳ ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ ،<y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫<ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )= ‪ .(۲۱۹‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(http://canon.com/cig‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻛﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫‪ ،http://canon.com/cig‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﺑﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻌﺿﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺑﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪/Camera-linked information‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ]‪/Library‬ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻭﻓﺭﻱ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪ Internet Explorer‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻭﺷﺭﻭﻁﻪ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪،Windows‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Set Up Web Services‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Set Up Web Services‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺗﻙ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫]‪/Login‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪/Camera‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]▲[ ﺃﻭ ]▼[ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪/Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪ (٦۹‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٦‬ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Edit Web‬‬
‫‪/Services‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥٦‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.(٤٦ =) “iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪) CameraWindow‬ﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ )ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۸‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ - Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫‪ (CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫• ‪Windows 7 Service Pack 1‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫• ‪ Mac OS X 10.6.8‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻥ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻧﻅﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ )‪.(LAN‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫○ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫○ ‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‬
‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (TKIP‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (AES‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (AES‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.WEP‬‬
‫○‪۱‬‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [3‬ﻭ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ[ ﺛﻡ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫• ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ :WEP‬ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺗﺩﻋﻣﻪ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ )‪ :WPA-PSK (TKIP‬ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ WEP‬ﻣُﺣﺳﱠﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪.TKIP‬‬‫ )‪ :WPA-PSK (AES‬ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ WEP‬ﻣُﺣﺳﱠﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪.AES‬‬‫ )‪ :WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ WPA‬ﻣُﺣﺳﱠﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪.TKIP‬‬‫ )‪ :WPA2-PSK (AES‬ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ WPA‬ﻣُﺣﺳﱠﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪.AES‬‬‫• ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ AES‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ‪.TKIP‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ WPA‬ﻭ‪.WPA2‬‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻬﻣﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Control Panel‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﺑﺩﺃ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Network and Internet‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Network and Internet‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Network and Sharing Center‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Network and Sharing Center‬ﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Change advanced sharing‬‬
‫‪/settings‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Change advanced sharing settings‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Choose media streaming‬‬
‫‪/options...‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻕ‪.[...‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Choose media streaming‬‬
‫‪/options...‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻕ‪ [...‬ﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Turn on media streaming‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻓﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Turn on network discovery‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Save changes‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ ‪ ICMP‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪UPnP‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ( ‪ ICMP‬ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ( ‪ UPnP‬ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Control Panel‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﺑﺩﺃ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/System and Security‬ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/System and Security‬ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ[‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Windows Firewall‬ﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.[Windows‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Windows Firewall‬ﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪.[Windows‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Advanced settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Advanced settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪/Inbound Rules‬ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Inbound Rules‬ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ‬
‫‪.ICMP‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ]‪/File and Printer Sharing‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ[ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑـ ]‪ ،[ICMPv4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Enable Rule‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪.UPnP‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ]‪Wireless Portable Devices‬‬
‫)‪/(UPnP-In‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ )‪،[(UPnP-In‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Enable Rule‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ]‪Windows Firewall with‬‬
‫‪/Advanced Security‬ﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪ [Disable Rule/‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﻭ‪ ،۷‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪(٦٤ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻣﻳﻠﻲ )= ‪ (٦۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪WPS‬‬
‫)‪ WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﻟـ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،[WPS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ ٍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﺑﺩﺃ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪/‬‬
‫‪ .[Control Panel‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪Add a/‬‬
‫‪.[device‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪/PIN Method‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۷‬ﻭ‪۸‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ = ‪ .٦٥‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]***[ ﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ‪ (CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪.[CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۰‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Untransferred Images‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ Pictures‬ﺃﻭ ‪My Pictures‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import All Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Select Images to Import‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ] [ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [ )ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ Pictures‬ﺃﻭ ‪My Pictures‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ )ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۲۸٦‬‬
‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٥۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ‪ (CameraWindow‬ﺑﺩﻻً‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۷٥‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ( ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪.<o><p‬‬
‫• ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.(۷٥ =) <m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ (.(۱۸‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )= ‪ ،(۲٦٤‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ )ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻺﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪/‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ(؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٦‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪.[3‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ -‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﻏﻳﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
۸٤
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﺻﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۲۷۱‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ (۳۱ =) USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ )ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋ ًﻳﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫) = ‪.(۲۰۱ ،۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ) = ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ) = ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ) = ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ) = ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫) = ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۳۱٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۲۱۹‬‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۲۳ – ۳۲۰‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۲۷٦‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ]‪ ،[4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪ ،[1‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )= ‪.(۳۳۰ – ۳۲٤‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۲۷٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﻳﻥ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪ (۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۷۱ ،۸٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪(۲۰٤ ،۲۰۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
۹٤
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۳ ،۱۰۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <i‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻧﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۳‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ = ‪ .۹٦‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻬﺎ )ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‪ [h‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ( )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ] [ )= ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ(‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻧﺎﺱ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻧﺎﺱ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ( ﻭﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺗﺑﺳﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫)ﻧﻭﻡ( ﻭﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪ drive mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪ ،(۱۷۹‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪ ،(۱۲٦‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ( ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ( ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺭﺿﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ )ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﻁﻔﻝ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ )ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻧﻲ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ( )= ‪ .(۱۱۳‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ (۱٦٥ =) <G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،[ ] :‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺿﻲء ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :W‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻔﻭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ )‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺊ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(Hybrid IS‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(۱۹۹‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.IS‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ (۱٦٥ =) <G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭ ًﺑﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪.<i‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫)ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪<i‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(۱۲٤‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 480 – 24‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 120 – 24‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ‪ 24‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 28‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 35‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 85‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 100‬ﺃﻭ ‪mm 120‬‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻻً ﺑﺅﺭ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ‪ 24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،mm 28‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 35‬ﻭ‪ 50‬ﻭ‪ 85‬ﻭ‪ 100‬ﻭ‪mm 120‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻲ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪<y‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ ،(۱۰٥‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱۲۰‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]][ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]][‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۰۷‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ][[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ][[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۰۷‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪.[$‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۰۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[$‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۰۷‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ[ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]^[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]![ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]![‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]![‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪(۲۸٦‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (۲۹۳‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۲۲٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ( ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﺣﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‬
‫ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ )= ‪(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<A‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻣﻝء ﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪،<y‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫< ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء )ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻫﺅﻻء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺄﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺳﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۲۳۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪ (۲۱۰‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ( )= ‪.(۲۱٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۱۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪،[.‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺻﺎ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧ ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ؛‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۱۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۲۰‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۱٤‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎﺋﻼً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻱٍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۱۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪،[.‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۱۳‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ )= ‪ (۱۱٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ (۲۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻪ )= ‪.(۲۲٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ )= ‪.(۲۳۲‬‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ُ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ُ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫‪ ٥۹٤ × ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪٤۲۰ × ۲۹۷) A3 – A5‬‬
‫ ‪ ۲۱۰ × ۱٤۸‬ﻣﻡ(‬‫‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫‪]z‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[R‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺎءﺓ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻳﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۲٥٥‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﺑﻐﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺑﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺯﺋﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫*‬
‫* ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ّ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ ﺑﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷۲‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﻳﻛﺑﱢﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻭﻋﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۲۸٤‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻳﻧﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺑﺄﻋﻳﻥ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ )= ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.(۹۱ =) “MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ‪ AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪[AF-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10 – 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ )= ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻣﻛﺑﱠﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ“ )= ‪.(۲۲۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ > < ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ ،<A‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ > < ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(۲۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ > < ﻛﺄﻓﻼﻡ ‪.(۱٦۲ =) iFrame‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ( )= ‪.(۲٥۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ > <‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺣﻣﻳًﺎ )= ‪(۲۳٦‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )= ‪ (۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۲٦٤‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪(۲۷۰‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ )= ‪(۲۷۳‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(۲٦۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<K‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [I‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء )ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء )= ‪.(۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )= ‪.(۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‪ ،[S‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (۱٦۹ =) ISO‬ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،[t‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )= ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻣﻧﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ [A‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺻﻌﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ (۱۳۸ =) [S‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[S‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫‪Macro‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻔﻭﻳﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪ (۳۳۳‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،[8‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻭﻟﻭﻧﻪ )]ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ[‪،‬‬
‫]ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ[( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ (۱۹۹‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺷﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫―‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ )ﺣﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻳُﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺗﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲۱٦‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ُﻋﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﻭﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [‬
‫)= ‪ .(۱۲۳‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[T‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[T‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﱠ ﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺑﺋﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[Y‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱٤۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[Y‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<r‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻓﻣﻬﻡ ﺑﻭﺳﻊ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۱‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻣﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻣﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺑﺗﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺑﻁء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻐﻣﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۱‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(۱۸٤‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺿﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺿﻣﺎﻣﻙ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۱‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ HQ‬ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪ :HQ‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ[‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۰‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۲۳۰‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۲۳٦‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۲۲٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۲۳٥‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ ،(۷٥‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪.(۲۳۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(۲٤٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ )= ‪ ،(۲٥٥ – ۲٤۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ )= ‪ ،(۲٤٥‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء )= ‪ ،(۲٦٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪ ،(۲۸٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪،(۲۹٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ )= ‪ .(۲۹٦‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۲۳۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ )= ‪ً (۲۳۰‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۲۷‬ﻟﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [x‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[v‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۳۷‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [x‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[v‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٦‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AF‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‪ [%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫< )= ‪.(۲۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪<E‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<E‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪– ۳۱۸‬‬
‫‪.(۳۲۹‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .iFrame‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[E‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ] [ )= ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪.Apple‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[E‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ 240‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(320 x 240‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ 120‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(640 x 480‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲۱٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
۱٦٤
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫• ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<G‬‬
‫• >‪ :<G‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ >‪ ،<G‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۳۲۹ – ۳۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪(<P‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<G‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<G‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۹۹ – ۱٦٦‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۱۹۳‬‬‫ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ <G‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ (۸۹ =) FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ (۹۱ =) Menu‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ ،<G‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫–‪ ۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.۳+‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪.(۲۰۹ =) <y‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ ﺿﻣﻥ ] [ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ .(AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪[AF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫)=‪.(۱۸٥‬‬
‫• ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ )= ‪.(۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫< ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[–]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.(۹۱ =) <m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪،FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ )‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ(‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ‪] :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪،‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ]‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۱۹۸‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ AEB‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]![ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ (۱۷۹‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ )= ‪ ،(۱٦٦‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻛﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.(۱۰۸ =) [$‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۱‬ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )=‪.(۱٦٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﻗﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۲٥٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ‪ DR‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻝ )= ‪.(۲۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ )ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ‪(DR‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]@[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ )= ‪(۱٦۹‬‬
‫―‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[–]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٪۲۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ] [‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[–]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٪٤۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ] [‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‪] ،‬‬
‫[–]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (۱٦۹ =) ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻫﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]@[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪ ،ND‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱/۸‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ۳‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )= ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ )‪ (tungsten‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻱ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۱۷٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭ ًﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۷٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪.A‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ )ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،(۱۷٤‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ؛ ‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪<y‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۰٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۷‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﺭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫―‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻟﻁﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺛﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻣﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪ (۱۷٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪.٥ – ۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۷۷‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻗﻭﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻑ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺗﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫‪ W‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 1‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪LV‬‬
‫]‪ ،[t‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ (۱۳۸ =) [t‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ (۱۹۱ =) AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪ ،(۱۸۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‬
‫* ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (۱۰۷‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪.(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(۱۱۰‬ﺳﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[W‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺛﺎﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[e‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪) [e‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[e‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ][[‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ ،[e‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪.MF‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪MF‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ )ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪ .(۱۸٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۸۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪ ،(۲۸٤‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪.(۲۰٦ =) <y‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪-MF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪،<n‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱٫٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲٫۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪.(۱۳۰ =) AF‬‬
‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [1.5x‬ﻭ]‪ [2.0x‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ۳٦٫۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۸۰٫۰‬ﻣﻡ ﻭ‪ ٤۸٫۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۲۰٫۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪.۱۰٥‬‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )] [ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱۸۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻲء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪.(۱۳۰ =) AF‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ )‪ 1‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 1‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ .<y‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۱۸۳‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪.(۱۸۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ‪.(۱٦۸ =) AF‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻻﻁﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(۱۰۷‬‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪ W‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]^[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺑﺎﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،(۱۸۱ =) [e‬ﻓﺳﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪ .(۱۱۳‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ )= ‪.(۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ > < )= ‪.(۲۱۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ] [ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻬﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )=‪ (۱۱۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )=‪.(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(BKT-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺭﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )=‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪۱۹۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]![ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ (۱۷۹‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۸۲‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.(۱۰۸ =) [$‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۱‬ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪.(۱۸۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪) [h‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[h‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ ،[h‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪) [Z‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[Z‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )= ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(۱٦٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ (۹۱ =) <n‬ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪ [FE‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ (۹۱ =) <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ >‪ <n‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ >‪ <n‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(۱٦۷ =) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(۱۹۳ =) [h‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ (۱۱۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.FE‬‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪۱۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)‪.(= ۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺯ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺯ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ "ﺧﺎﻡ" )ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ (۲۷ =) Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ "ﺧﺎﻡ" )ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )‪ (Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .TIFF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ – ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ – JPEG‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﻭﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪ (۱۱۲‬ﻭﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ (۱۷۲‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪ (۱۷۷‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻭ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻭ ‪.CR2‬‬
‫‪۱۹۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪) [ ] :‬ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ(‪) [ ] ،‬ﺩﻗﻳﻕ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( )= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۹‬‬
۲۰۰
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻌﻘﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‬
‫• ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ >‪(<Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [ ] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۲۰۳‬‬
‫• >‪ :<M‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪.(۲۰٦‬‬
‫‪۲۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ >‪(<Av‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫• >‪ :<B‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ >‪ <M‬ﻭ>‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪.(۲۰٦‬‬
‫‪۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪(<M‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۳۳۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ”–‪ “۲‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “۲+‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[h‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [ ] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪(<M‬‬
‫• >‪ :<D‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱٦۸‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪.(۲۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<D‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [X‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۸۹ =) FUNC.‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ (۹۱ =) <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ <M‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪،(۹۱ =) <n‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ >‪ <n‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ >‪ <n‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪.<y‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ > < ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫‪۲۰٦‬‬
‫<‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﺎﺕ ﺃﻱّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫@‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪.(۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪.(۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻲ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(۱۲۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۰۸‬‬
‫• ‪ :Av‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۲۰۳‬؛ ‪ :Tv‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۲۰۲‬؛‬
‫‪ :ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬؛ –‪ :+/‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۱٦٦‬؛ ‪ :MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪.(۱۸۲‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]@[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ ،<y‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <7‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ] [‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Tv‬ﻭ‪ Av‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑـ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻓﻲ >‪ ،<A‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<K‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪۲۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۰٦‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪<y‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۰٦‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺓء‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪<y‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )= ‪.(۲۰٦‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫‪Av‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫‪Tv‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫–‪+/‬‬
‫• –‪ :+/‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۱٦٦‬؛ ‪ :ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬؛ ‪ :Tv‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۲۰۲‬؛ ‪ :Av‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۲۰۳‬‬
‫‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﻱّ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،(<p‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.(۹۱ =) <m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑـ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑـ ] [( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪ ،(۲۱۹‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ >‪ ،<G‬ﻭ>‪ ،<M‬ﻭ>‪ ،<B‬ﻭ >‪.<D‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫<‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫< ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑـ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‬
‫< ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ 1] AF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ[ )= ‪.(۱۸٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫< ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪ ،(۱۷٥‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]‪ ،[%‬ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫< ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]‪ [%‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫< ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺄﻱﱟ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪(ON/OFF‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ > <‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )>‪ ،<G‬ﻭ>‪ ،<M‬ﻭ>‪ ،<B‬ﻭ>‪(<D‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ >‪ ،<G‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<M‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺃﻭ >‪(۲۰٤ – ۱٦٦ =) <D‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪(۱۸۲‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ )= ‪(۲۱۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ > <‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ .۳‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ >‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۷٦‬‬
‫< ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ >‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫< ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻣﺱ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﺭﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻉ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ[ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻓﺭﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲۱٦‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ>‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ؛‬
‫ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲۱۷‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]‪ [o][p‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪.۰‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]^[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫= ‪.۲۱٦‬‬
‫‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۳۱٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪*(۲۲۲‬‬
‫*ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۱۳٤ =) [4‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱٤ ،۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪۲۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ‪ ،RGB‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ‪GPS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ‪) RGB‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ( ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺗﻘﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) UTC: Coordinated Universal Time‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﱠﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱۳٦‬ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻫﻝ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(۲۲۹‬‬
‫[ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(۲۱۹‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )= ‪ ،(۲۱۹‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﻳﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.(۲۱۹ =) <p‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <g‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫>‪ .<k‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۲۳٦‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫)= ‪ (۲٤۰‬ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫; ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﺋﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۲٤٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ];[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ] [‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲۲٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ .<q><r‬ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪،<m‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪. ٤‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<7‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<7‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<o‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ ،(۲۲٤‬ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪ ،(۲۳٤‬ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ .(۲۳۳‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۲۳٦‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۲٤۱‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (۲۹۳ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۲۹٦‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۲٤٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪،(۲٥٦ – ۲٥۱‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ] [‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۲٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺻﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧ ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۲٦‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪۲۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻣﻌﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻁﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻰ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ ،<y‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ >‪ <y‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۸‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۲۸‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱۳٦‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﺑـ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <m‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۲۲٤‬ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ .(۲۳۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ]ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۲۳٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۲٤۱‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (۲۹۳ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۲۹٦‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(۹۱‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪۲۳۰‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻅﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۱٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۱۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۳۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪.<g‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۳‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪[...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۸٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ .<7‬ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱﱟ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬‫ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )= ‪(۲۲٥‬‬‫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪(۲۳۰‬‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَ ﺭَ ﺿﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۲٤۱ ،۲٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪۲۳٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(۲٦۸ ،۲٦۷‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۳٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲۳۷‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۳٦‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۸‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۳٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۲۳٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ‪ ،[JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ‪ [ +JPEG‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺣﻙ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۲٤۸‬‬
‫‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۲۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۳۷‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ =‪ ،۲٤۱‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۳۸‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲٤۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲٤۳‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۲٤۳‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(۲۳٥‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺋﺗﻲ )= ‪ .(۲٤٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪ ،(۲۱٦‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ )= ‪ ،(۲۳٤‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(۲۳٦‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲٤۰‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ ،(۲۹۳ =) (DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﺟﻭﻡ )‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows Vista‬ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪(.RAW‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪.(۲٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ )ﻓﺋﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ [I‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ <A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ [S‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺋﺗﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲٤٥‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪۲٤٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲٤٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۳۸‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ ([q][r‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻣﺳﻳﺔ )ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟـ ] [‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻭ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺳﺣﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺳﺣﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۲٥٥ – ۲٥۰‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻛـ ]‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻭﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲٥۱‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲٥۰‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱۲٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۲۳۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۱۷۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲٥۱‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﻘﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫‪۲٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﺋﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲٥۱‬‬
‫‪۲٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۹۱ =) [1‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲۳۳‬‬
‫‪۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.۲٥۱‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]*[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۱۷ - ۲۱٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]*[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﺹ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﻣﻥ‬
‫] [( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺹ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ] [ ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪۲٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪۲٥۸‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺫﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪،‬‬
‫= ‪.(۲۷۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱۳٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۱٦‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۹‬‬
۲٦۰
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫‪۲٦۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(۲۱٦‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۲‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭ‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ ،(۱٥۸‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ]ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۸۹ =) FUNC.‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۹۱‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ (۱۸‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲٦٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۲٦٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ (.[3‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭ‪2‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣُﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ ( ۲۷‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (۳۰۰ =) Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲٦۷‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲٦۷‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲٦۷‬ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۲٦۷‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۸‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )‪ (9999 – 0001‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲،۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0001‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.((۲٦۷‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۲۷‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۹‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۸٦‬ﻭﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷۰‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ [1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ ،(۱۸۲ =) MF‬ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪(۹٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (۷۸‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‪/‬ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫‪۲۷۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺩﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪ (۲۱۰‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻧﺿﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <m‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷۲‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦۳‬ﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷۳‬‬
‫يساسألا اريماكلا فئاظو طبض‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫قم بحفظ اإلعدادات‪.‬‬
‫‪zz‬اضغط على الزر <‪ .>n‬سيتم عرض [قبول‬
‫التغييرات؟]‪.‬‬
‫‪zz‬اضغط على الزرين <‪ >q><r‬أو أدر القرص <‪>7‬‬
‫الختيار [نعم]‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على الزر <‪.>m‬‬
‫‪WW‬سيتم تسجيل المعلومات التي يتم تعيينها في هذه الخطوات‬
‫في الصور‪.‬‬
‫•للتحقق من المعلومات التي قمت بإدخالها‪ ،‬اختر [عرض معلومات حقوق الطبع] من الشاشة في الخطوة ‪ ،١‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على الزر <‪.>m‬‬
‫•يمكنك أيضًا استخدام البرامج المضمنة (=‪ )27‬إلدخال معلومات حقوق الطبع‪ ،‬وتغييرها‪ ،‬وحذفها‪ .‬وقد ال‬
‫تظهر بعض األحرف ‪ -‬التي يتم إدخالها باستخدام البرامج المضمنة ‪ -‬على الكاميرا‪ ،‬ولكن سيتم تسجيلها في‬
‫الصور بشكل صحيح‪.‬‬
‫•بعد حفظ الصور على جهاز كمبيوتر‪ ،‬يمكنك استخدام البرنامج لمراجعة معلومات حقوق النشر المسجلة في‬
‫الصور‪.‬‬
‫•يمكنك ً‬
‫أيضا إدخال اسم على الشاشة في الخطوة ‪ 2‬بالضغط على األزرار <‪ >o><p><q><r‬أو ‬
‫تدوير القرص <‪ >7‬لتحديد األحرف‪ ،‬ثم الضغط على الزر <‪ .>m‬حرك المؤشر من خالل تدوير الحلقة ‬
‫<‪ ،>y‬واضغط على الزر <‬
‫> لحذف األحرف حسب الحاجة‪.‬‬
‫حذف كل معلومات حقوق الطبع‬
‫يمكنك حذف ً‬
‫كال من اسم المؤلف وتفاصيل حقوق الطبع في نفس الوقت كما يلي‪.‬‬
‫‪zz‬اتبع الخطوة ‪ ١‬في =‪ 273‬واختر [حذف معلومات حقوق‬
‫الطبع]‪.‬‬
‫‪zz‬اضغط على الزرين <‪ >q><r‬أو أدر القرص <‪>7‬‬
‫الختيار [موافق]‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على الزر <‪.>m‬‬
‫•لن يتم حذف معلومات حقوق الطبع التي تم بالفعل تسجيلها في الصور‪.‬‬
‫‪274‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۲۸٤‬‬
‫• ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪(۲۸۲ =) [HDMI‬‬
‫• ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ[ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫• ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۳۰۰ =) [Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪۲۷٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] [3‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۸‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬‫[ )= ‪ ،(۲۰‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲٦٤‬ﻭ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪ ،(۲۸٤‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻬﺎ ﻟـ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[ )= ‪(۲٦٦‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(۱۱۳‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )= ‪(۱۷٥‬‬‫ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )= ‪ (۱٥۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )= ‪(۱٥۲‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ (۱۳۷ =) <K‬ﺃﻭ > < )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۱٦۱‬‬‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )= ‪(۲۷۳‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫‪۲۷٦‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫‪۲۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﱠ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ▲ ﻅﺎﻫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ▲ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-5L‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LX/CB-2LXE‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-5L‬‬
‫‪۲۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC30‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻫﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ‪WP-DC47‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻕ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤۰‬ﻣﺗﺭً ﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .PictBridge‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۳۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI HTC-100‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻣﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۱‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ .OK/Select‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ OK/Select‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪) .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫[ )= ‪) .(۱٥۸‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.HDMI CEC‬‬
‫‪۲۸۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۲‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (PAL‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (۱۳۰ =) AF‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (۱۸۲ =) MF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC30‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱٦‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۷‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸٥‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸٦‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ = ‪.۲۸۰‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫‪۲۸۷‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۷ – ۲۸٦‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۲۸۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۲۹۰‬‬
‫‪۲۸۸‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۸‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۷‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۸‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۲۹۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۹۰‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ ،<q><r‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹۱‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۸۷ – ۲۸٦‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹۲‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۲۹٦‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺅﻛﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪.(Digital Print Order Format) DPOF‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[2‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎء ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫‪۲۹۳‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[3‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ =‪ ،۲۹٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۲۳۸‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۹٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲۹٥‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۹٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪،(۲۹٥ – ۲۹۳‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹٦‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۲۷‬ﻭﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۹۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲۹۷‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۹۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲۹۸‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ،۲۹۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪۲۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣُﺻﻧِﻊ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ .(۳۰۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺗﻪ‬
‫)ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۸٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰۰‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪.[Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،[Eye-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰۱‬‬
۳۰۲
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۳۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱٥‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ُﺗﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۲۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(۲۰‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ .(۱۱۲‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪.(۲٦٤‬‬
‫‪۳۰٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۳۲۹ – ۳۲۸‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ]‪ [h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ )= ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(۱۹۳ =) [h‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪.(۳۳٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۱۳۲‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪.macro‬‬
‫• ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪.(۱۹۱ ،۱۸٥ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻏﺎﻟﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(۱۹۳ =) [h‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(۱٦٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۲٥٤ ،۱۷۲‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(۱٦۸ ،۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(۱٦٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(۱٦۸ ،۱٦۷‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳۳٥‬‬
‫‪۳۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۹۷ ،۱۹٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳۳٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۲۰٥ ،۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺄ ﱡﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۱۲٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۲‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ (٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۲٦۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۳۲٤ – ۳۱۸‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ .(۱۱۳‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲٦٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺗﻲ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻭﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۲٦۷ ،۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۲٦۸‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )= ‪.(۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱٤٦‬ﻭ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۲٦۸‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (۲۱۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ )= ‪ ،(۲٦۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱٤٦‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱٦۲‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۳۰۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻭ>‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۳۰۰‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<o‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻳﻛﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )= ‪.(٥۹ ،٥٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﺿﻌﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/.‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﺿﻌﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱،۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻠﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۸۲‬‬
‫‪۳۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )= ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫• ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۲٦۸‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۲۰۱ ،۱٦٥ ،۱۳٥ ،۹٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۲٥٥ – ۲٥۰‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۲٤۱ ،۲٤۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫• ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪.(۳۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟـ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ )= ‪.(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱٥‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )= ‪(۲۳٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪AVI/RAW‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ!‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺋﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/.‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ* )= ‪ ،(۲۳۳‬ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ* )= ‪ ،(۲۳٥‬ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )= ‪ ،(۲٤٥‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۲٤۳‬ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ*‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲٥٥ – ۲٥۰‬ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩء* )= ‪ ،(۲٦٦‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪ ،(۲۹۳‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ*‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲۹٦‬ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ* )= ‪. (۲۳۲ – ۲۳۱‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺟﻣﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(۲۹٥ ،۲٤۷ ،۲٤۲ ،۲۳۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۲۹۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۲۹٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۲۹۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۲۹٦‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۲۳٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪ (۲٤۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۲٤٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (۲٤٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۲۹۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۲۹٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ ۱،۰۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ ،[3‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (۲٦۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۲٦۷‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۲۸٦‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(۲۹۰‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫• ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪(٥۷ =) .‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ‪ SSL‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۱٥‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪(۳۰۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪AEB‬‬
‫)= ‪ / (۱۷۱‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۱۹۱‬‬
‫‪Drive mode‬‬
‫)= ‪(۱۷۹ ،۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۹۹‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪RAW ،(۱۲٤‬‬
‫)= ‪(۱۹۸‬‬
‫‪۳۱٤‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪،۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪(۲۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ )= ‪(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ )= ‪(۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۰٥‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۱۸۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪،۱٤۰‬‬
‫‪ ،(۱۸۲ ،۱۸۱‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫)= ‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪،(۳۱۸‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )= ‪(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪،۱۱۱‬‬
‫‪(۱۹٤ ،۱۹۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪(۱۸٤ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫)= ‪(۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۰٥ ،۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪AE‬‬
‫)= ‪(۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۰۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪(۱۷۳ =) ND‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(۱٦۷ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫‪(۱۹٦ =) FE‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(۲۱۰‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪،۲۰۲‬‬
‫‪(۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪(۲۱۰‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۰٤ ،۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۱٦٦‬‬
‫˾˼‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫˼˽‬
‫˼˽‬
‫˾˽‬
‫˿˽‬
‫̀˽‬
‫́˽‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪(۱۸۲ =) MF‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۲٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(۱٦٦‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ؛ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ—ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ—ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲۲۰‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫)= ‪(۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ )= ‪(۲٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪ /‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(۲۱۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪(۱۷۳ =) ND‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱٦٦‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪،(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪،۱٤۷‬‬
‫‪(۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۳۱۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻘﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪(۳۰۰‬‬
‫‪۳۱٦‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۱٥‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ – ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫)= ‪(۲٦۹‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( )= ‪ ،(۲۰۲‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۰٤ ،۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۲٥٤ ،۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪،(۱۹٤ ،۱۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪،۱٤۰‬‬
‫‪(۱۸۲ ،۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )= ‪(۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۳٤‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫)= ‪ / (۱۹۹‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪RAW ،(۱۲۷ ،۱۲٤‬‬
‫)= ‪) MOV ،(۱۹۸‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪،(۲۳۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪– ۲٥۰‬‬
‫‪(۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(۲۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪(۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۲٥۳ ،۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫)= ‪(۲٥٥ ،۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۲۸۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪(۲۱٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [o][p‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪.۰‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ .<7‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )= ‪) (۱۳٦‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (۱۳٦‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۲٥٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲٥۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.(۲۸٦ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪۳۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪A G M B D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۱٦٦‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۲۰٥‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۲۰۳‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪– – O‬‬
‫– – –‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪(۱٦۷‬‬
‫*‪O ۱‬‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۱۹٤ ،۱۹۳ ،۱۱۱‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۱۹٥‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۲۰۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪/(۱٦۷ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۱۹٦ =) FE‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ(‪/‬ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬
‫<( )=‪((۲۱۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪– – O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(۱۸۲ ،۱۸۱ ،۱٤۰‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫)= ‪/(۱۸۲‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۱۹۱ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۱۸٥ =) AF‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(۱۹۰‬‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(۱۸۸ ،۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(۱۱۰‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ۲* .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Z‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]![‪ ٤* .‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ٥* .‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
E
K
T
E
Y
x
t P S
v
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
O O O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
O O O
– – ۲*
–
–
O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O
– – – O O O O – –
–
–
O O
–
–
O
–
–
O O
–
–
O
O O O O O O O O O
–
٥*
O O
–
٥*
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O
–
–
O
٤*
٤*
٤*
٥*
O
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O
۳۱۹
–
O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O O
–
–
–
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪A G M B D‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ‪(۱۷۲ =) DR‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫– –‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ )= ‪(۱۷۳‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۱٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪Sh‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۱۷۷‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )= ‪(۱۹۱ ،۱۷۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪(۱۷۹ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ۲* .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ]‪ [x‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [h] ۳* .[v‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ٥* .‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ٦* .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ :٥ – ۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ ۷* .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ] [ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[t‬‬
‫‪۳۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
E
K
T
E
Y
x
t P S
v
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
۳*
۳*
O O
– –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
٤*
–
–
O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
–
O O O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
– O O O O O O O O O
.‫ – ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬.‫ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬O
–
–
O O O
–
O
–
–
–
۳۲۱
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪A G M B D‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(۱۰۷‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‪$‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ*‪۳‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(۱٦۸‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪(۱۷۳ =) ND‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۹۸‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )= ‪(۱۹۹‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ۲* .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ٤* .‬ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ٥* .‬ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۱٤۷‬‬
‫‪۳۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
E
K
T
E
Y
x
t P S
v
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
O O O O
–
–
٤*
–
–
O
–
O O O
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O
–
–
O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
٥*
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
O O O O O O O
٥*
O O O O O O O O O O O O
O – – – – – – – –
.‫ – ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬.‫ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬O
–
–
۳۲۳
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪A G M B D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪(۱۸٤ =) AF‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪۳*(۱۸٥ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۱۸۳ ،۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(1.5x/2.0x‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(۱۳۰ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۸۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪٤‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ )= ‪(۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ )= ‪(۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ )= ‪(۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– – –‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ۲* .‬ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ[‪] ٤* .‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪.[A‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
E
K
T
E
Y
x
t P S
v
O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O
–
–
– O O – – O – O O O O O
O O – O O O O – O – – –
O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O
–
–
O O
– O
–
–
O O O O
– – O O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
– O O – – – – – – – – – – – O O O – – O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – O O O O – – – – O O – – O O – O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – O O O O – – – – O – – – O O – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O
– – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – – –
O O O O O O O O O – ٥* O O – ٥* O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
٥*
O – – –
O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O –
– – – O O O O – – – – O O – – O O – O – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – O O O O – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
.‫ – ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬.‫ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬O
۳۲٥
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪A G M B D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۲۰٥ ،۱۹۷ ،۱۹٥ ،۱۳۲ ،۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺯ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺯ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫– –‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O‬‬
‫– –‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– – –‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ )= ‪(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ۱۰ – ۲/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪(۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(۱٦۸ =) AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )= ‪(۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۲٦‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
E
K
T
E
Y
x
t P S
v
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – O O O – – – – – O – – – O – – – O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
.‫ – ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬.‫ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬O
۳۲۷
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪A G M B D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(۲۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(۱۹۹ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )= ‪(۲۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(۲۱۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪(۲۱۲‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۲۸‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪t P S‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪– – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪– – – – – – – – – – – – – – O O O – – O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– – – – – – – – –‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ )= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ )= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ]‪ [E‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫–‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫‪۳۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲٦۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲٦۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲۷۱‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲٦۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫= ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲٦۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫= ‪۲۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫= ‪۲۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫= ‪۲۷۳‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫= ‪۲٦٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫= ‪۲٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪۳۰۰‬‬
‫= ‪۲٦۸ ،۲٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫= ‪۲۷۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫= ‪۲٦۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪۲۷٥‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫= ‪۲۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۷۰‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫= ‪۲۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۷۱ ،۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫‪۳۳۰‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫= ‪۲۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۲۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫= ‪۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪۲۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫= ‪۲٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪۲۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫= ‪۲٥۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۲۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫= ‪۲٥۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫= ‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۳٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۲٤۳‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۲٤۳‬‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‬
‫= ‪۲٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۲۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪۲٥٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫= ‪۲٤۸‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۲۹٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫= ‪۲۹٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۲۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫= ‪۲۹٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۹۳‬‬
‫‪۳۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻗﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺛﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ(‬
‫‪ ۱۲٫۱‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪) 5.2 :٥x‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( ‪) 26.0 -‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪) 24 :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( ‪) 120 -‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪(mm‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD TFT‬ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۷٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ) ‪ ۳٫۰‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ( )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٤٦۱،۰۰۰ :‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ،Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪) DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪RAW (CR2 (Canon Original)) ،Exif 2.3 (JPEG) :‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV :‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪H.264 :‬؛ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪) Linear PCM :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ((‬
‫‪Hi-speed USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-5L‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC30‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪(IEEE 802.11g/n) OFDM‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪(IEEE 802.11b) DSSS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ*‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫* ﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ (PC1819) ۱۳ – ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PC1882) ۱۱ – ۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫‪WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP) ،WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP) ،WEP‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۲٦٫۹ × ٥۹٫۰ × ۹۸٫۸‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۹۸‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ ۱۷۳‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۲۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ۱۰‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬
‫)‪.Association (CIPA‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪5568‬‬
‫‪1379‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪12M/4000x3000‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۱‬‬
‫‪6M/2816x2112‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۲‬‬
‫‪2M/1600x1200‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪4000x3000‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪2192‬‬
‫‪8850‬‬
‫‪2431‬‬
‫‪9814‬‬
‫‪3721‬‬
‫‪15020‬‬
‫‪7442‬‬
‫‪30040‬‬
‫‪12927‬‬
‫‪52176‬‬
‫‪27291‬‬
‫‪110150‬‬
‫‪40937‬‬
‫‪165225‬‬
‫‪446‬‬
‫‪1804‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .4:3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۲۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ .4:3‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ 16:9‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ 1920 × 1080‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۱۱‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۲۸‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٥۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۱۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫*‪ ۲۷ ۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪.(۱٦۲ =) iFrame‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ٥۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳۷‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪.(۱٦۲ =) iFrame‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۷,۰‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۲,۳‬ﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫*‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ (j‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﻣﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫*‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﻣﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ۱٫٥‬ﻣﻡ – ‪ ۲۰‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱٫٥‬ﻡ – ‪ ۲۰‬ﻡ‬
‫* ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٫۱‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ۰٫۹‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪ ۰٫۹‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪ ،<A‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪) <M‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ 1 – 1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 15 – 1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪،1 ،1.3 ،1.6 ،2 ،2.5 ،3.2 ،4 ،5 ،6 ،8 ،10 ،13 ،15‬‬
‫‪،1/10 ،1/8 ،1/6 ،1/5 ،1/4 ،0.3 ،0.4 ،0.5 ،0.6 ،0.8‬‬
‫‪،1/60 ،1/50 ،1/40 ،1/30 ،1/25 ،1/20 ،1/15 ،1/13‬‬
‫‪،1/320 ،1/250 ،1/200 ،1/160 ،1/125 ،1/100 ،1/80‬‬
‫‪،1/1250 ،1/1000 ،1/800 ،1/640 ،1/500 ،1/400‬‬
‫‪1/2000 ،1/1600‬‬
‫‪۳۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ >‪<B‬‬
‫‪) f/2.0 – f/8.0‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) f/5.9 – f/8.0 ،‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫‪،f/4.5 ،f/4.0 ،f/3.5 ،f/3.2 ،f/2.8 ،f/2.5 ،f/2.2 ،f/2.0‬‬
‫‪f/8.0 ،f/7.1 ،f/6.3 ،f/5.9 ،f/5.6 ،f/5.0‬‬
‫*‬
‫* ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-5L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۳٫۷‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۱۲۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۰۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۷٫۹ × ٤٤٫۹ × ۳۲٫۰‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ ۲٥‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LX/CB-2LXE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰٫۰۸٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰٫۰٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٤٫۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۰٫۷ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(NB-5L‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۱٫۰ × ۸۱٫٦ × ٥۷٫٥‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٥ :CB-2LX‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥۹ :CB-2LXE‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫• ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺷﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۱۸٥ ............................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۷٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ‪۷٥ ........‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۷٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪۷٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ‪۷٦ ،۷٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٥٤ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪٤٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪۷۲ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪٦۲ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٥۰ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۱۸٥ ،۱۸٤ ..................................... AF‬‬
‫‪۱۷۹ ......................................... Drive mode‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۲۷٦ .........................................‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪۱۸۱ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۲۹٦ .......................................‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۲۰٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٥٤ ............................‬‬
‫‪۲۸٦ ،۲۸۰ ................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۱۹۰ .............................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٦٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۳۰٤ ..........................‬‬
‫‪۱۹۸ ................................................... RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‪۲٦۲ .................................................‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۲۰۲ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪۲٥٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪۱۲۷ ............‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۳۳٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪۲٥۳ ،۱۷۷ ............................................‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱۸۸ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۱۸٤ .........................(AF‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۲۰۳ .....................................‬‬
‫‪) C1/C2‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۲۱۲ ...............................‬‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪٦۹ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٥۰ ...........................................‬‬
‫‪٤٥ ..................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٤٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪۲۹۳ ................................................. DPOF‬‬
‫‪۳٦ ..................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٥۹ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ‪٦۹ ..................... CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪٦٤ ..................................................... WPS‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪٦٤ ........................................PBC‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪٦٦ ......................................... PIN‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ‪۱۷۳ ......................................... ND‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٤۲ ..............‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۱٦۲ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱۳۸ ............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪۲٤۸ ،٦۳ ،٥٥ ،٥۳ ،٤۹ ..................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ‪۸۲ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱۱۰ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪٤۸ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۸۲ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۳ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ‪۲٥۱ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪۲۹ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۲۹ ...................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪۲ .................................... Solution Disk‬‬
‫‪۳۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪۳۱٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۸٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪۲٥۳ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‪۲٥۱ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۲٥٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۲٥٥ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲٥۰ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪۱۸۸ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۱۸٤ .......................................AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪۱۹۰ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱۸۷ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪۱۳۰ ................................... AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱۹۱ ............................................AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٤۹ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۳۱٤ ،۲۱۰ .........................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۱۷۹ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ HQ‬ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٥۸ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ‪۱۳۱ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪۱۰٥ ،۹٦ ،۲۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۱۰٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۲٦٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۲٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱٤ ،۲ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪۹۳ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۲۷۸ ،۲٦٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۳۱٦ ،۳۱٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۰ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪۳۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۲٤۰ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۲۳٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱۳۳ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲۸٥ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۲۸٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲٤ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲۲٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۲۳٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۲۸۱ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۲۲٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۲۳٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۲٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۲۳۳ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱۱۱ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء‪۱۹٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۹۳ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱۹٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۳۱۸ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۹۱ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ‪٥٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‪۲۷٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪٤۳ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪۱۷٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۹۳ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۱۸۳ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪۲٤۰ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪۱۳۲ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۲٤٤ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪۲۷۸ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪۱۰۷ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪۱۰۸ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٥۷ ................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٥٥ ...............‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪۱۰۸ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) AUTO‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۹٦ ،۸۸ ،۲۱ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۲۸٦ ،۲۸٥ ،۲۸٤ ،۲۸۱ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۱۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪۲٦٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۲۰ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪۱۸ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۱۹ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۹۹ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۸۷ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪۱٦٦ .............................................. AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ‪۱۷۳ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۲٥٥ ،۱۲٥ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ‪۱۷۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‪۱۲٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۲٥۰ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪۱۷٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۱۷٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪۱۲٦ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۸٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱۳۸ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪۳۰۰ ،۲ .................................... Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪٤٤ ،۲ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۳۳٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪٦۹ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪۷۱ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻭﻟﺔ ‪۷۰ ................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪۲۰٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۲۳٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٤۸ ...................‬‬
‫ﺣﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺿﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٤٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٤٥ .......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٤٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٤۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪٤۸ ..............‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ‪٤٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪٤۸ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪٤۸ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‪۲۱۰ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۲٥٤ ،۱۷۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٥۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٥٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱۳۸ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲٤۳ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۲٦۹ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٥۱ ............................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪۱٦٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱٦۷ ............................................AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱۹٦ ............................................FE‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۹۱ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪۱۸۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۲۳٥ .....................................‬‬
‫‪۳۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۲۳۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪٥۸ ..............................................MAC‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۳۱۰ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٤۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ‪۲۰٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۱٦۹ ............................................. ISO‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲۷۸ ،۲ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۲۸۱ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ )ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ( ‪۱۲٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪٥۷ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪٥۸ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪٥٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ HQ‬ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٥۸ ....‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٥۰ ....................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪۱۷۷ ،۱٤٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺋﺗﻲ‪۲٤٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۱٦۲ ....................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۳۲۰ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۸۹ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪۲ ...... DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱٦۷ .................................................. AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱۹۱ .................................................. AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۱۹٦ .................................................. FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۱۸٥ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪۲۸۱ .......................... (AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪۲۸۱ ................‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪۳۰ ،۲ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ‪٦۲ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‪٥٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪٥٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۰ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪۱۷۷ ،۱٤٤ .........‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪۲۸٥ ،۲۷۹ .................................AC‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪۱٦۸ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱۳۷ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۲۲۲ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﺞ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٦۰ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱۳۷ ...........‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪۲۳٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪۱۹۹ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۲۲۰ ................................ GPS‬‬
‫‪۳٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪۷۸ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ‪۸۰ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪۸۲ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱۳٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٥۷ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۱٥٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪۱۲۳ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪۱۸۱ ........................................... Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪۱۸۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۱٤۳ ..................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ‪٦۸ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ‪٦۸ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪۱۷۱ ...............................................AEB‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۷۲ ،٥۰ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻫـ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪٥۰ ..............................CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ‪٥۰ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪٥۲ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ‪٥۳ .........................‬‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪۱۱۳ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪۲۸٥ .....................................‬‬
‫‪۳٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺭﻣﺯ ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and‬‬
‫‪non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T‬‬
‫‪patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.‬‬
‫‪No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٤۲‬‬
© CANON INC. 2012
CEL-ST3DA2N1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising